PROJECT MANUAL MORELAND STATION APARTMENT …...AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."...

BAMA Architecture and Design

PROJECT MANUAL MORELAND STATION APARTMENT BUILDING

VOLUME II PORTLAND, OREGON

68 UNIT APARTMENT BUILDING

HUD PROJECT # 126‐35306 ARCHITECT PROJECT NUMBER 201207

CONSTRUCTION SET AUGUST 21, 2013

Architect: BAMA Architecture and Design, LLC

by

Print Name Signature Owner: Urban Evolution, Inc.

by

Print Name Signature Contractor: Pavilion Construction, LLC

by

Print Name Signature Lender:

by

Print Name Signature Bonding Company:

by

Print Name Signature Owner: Architect: Urban Evolution, Inc. BAMA Architecture and Design 7400 SE Milwaukie Avenue 1631 NE Broadway #754 Portland, Oregon 97202 Portland, Oregon 97232

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 221113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

201207 / Moreland Station Apartments 1/11/2013 Bid Documents

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230713 DUCT INSULATION 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 233113 METAL DUCTS 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 238113 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS 238127 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM


DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 263323 CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING


DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM


DIVISION 31 EARTH WORK

311000 SITE CLEARING 312000 EARTH MOVING


DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334600 SUBDRAINAGE


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsEXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

1/11/2013 Construction Documents 220516 - 1

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Pipe loops and swing connections.2. Alignment guides and anchors.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Product certificates.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:

1. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.



B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.

3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener

manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.

END OF SECTION 220516

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsSLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.2. Sleeve-seal systems.3. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. CALPICO, Inc.3. Metraflex Company (The).4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456804938&mf=04&src=pdf







1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."



3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsCHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

1/11/2013 Construction Documents 220523.14 - 1

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.2. Iron swing check valves.3. Iron swing check valves with closure control.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Valves.e. Hammond Valve.f. Kitz Corporation.g. The Macomb Groups.h. Milwaukee Valve Company.i. NIBCO INC.j. Powell Valves.k. Red-White Valve Corporation.l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Valves.d. Hammond Valve.e. Kitz Corporation.f. Milwaukee Valve Company.g. NIBCO INC.h. Red-White Valve Corporation.i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.f. Disc: PTFE.

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456935180&mf=&src=pdf
























a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Valves.d. Hammond Valve.e. Kitz Corporation.f. Legend Valve.g. The Macomb Groups.h. Milwaukee Valve Company.i. NIBCO INC.j. Powell Valves.k. Red-White Valve Corporation.l. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.m. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.f. Trim: Bronze.g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Valves.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.f. Trim: Composition.g. Seat Ring: Bronze.h. Disc Holder: Bronze.i. Disc: PTFE.j. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:



















a. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.f. Trim: Bronze.g. Gasket: Asbestos free.h. Closure Control: Factory-installed exterior lever and spring.

B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Weight-Closure Control:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Valves.d. Hammond Valve.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.f. Trim: Bronze.g. Gasket: Asbestos free.h. Closure Control: Factory-installed exterior lever and weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.











3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves (where required by code):

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and

weight or spring; metal-seat or resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered.2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller where required by code: Bronze swing check valves, Class 125, bronze disc with soldered or threaded end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger where required by code:

1. Iron swing check valves, Class 125, nonmetallic-to-metal seats with threaded or flangedend connections.

2. Iron swing check valves with closure control, Class 125, lever and spring with threaded orflanged end connections.

END OF SECTION 220523.14

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsHANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.5. Pipe positioning systems.6. Equipment supports.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.2. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.






A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Per code, clevis hangers or equal.

C. Pex Pipe Hangers

1. Description: Pex hangers.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.



2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.



D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.




4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.



3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.



9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: ABS vertical piping does not require vertical floor clamps. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsIDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for main service and main shut off valve, no additional labeling required unless code required:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.3. Background Color: White.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.




C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Metal Labels for main service and main shut off valve, no additional labeling required unless code required.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: White.b. Letter Color: Black.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsPLUMBING PIPING INSULATION


SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic hot-water piping.2. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3837&mf=04&src=pdf














2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75.d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-20.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.





























a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.




Company; 46-50.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



Company; 30-45.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.5. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




























2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
















B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.3. Color: White.4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.5. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.c. Tee covers.d. Flange and union covers.e. End caps.f. Beveled collars.g. Valve covers.h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.

















d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.b. Compac Corporation; 130.c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.3. Thickness: 6 mils.4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 500 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inchthick, [1/2 inch] [3/4 inch] wide with wing seal.


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.11 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Engineered Brass Company.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.
















c. McGuire Manufacturing.d. Plumberex.e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.







2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches] [4 inches] o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install



insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties withcontinuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.



4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of samethickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.



3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.



3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end

joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.



B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

C. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Installed Outside: Mineral-fiber, preformed pipe insulation, Type I, 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.11 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Sanitary Waste Piping : Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:



1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE




1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 30 mils thick.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsDOMESTIC WATER PIPING


SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.



G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.

B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions.

C. Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:




a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. Jomar International.e. Matco-Norca.f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping."











I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.

Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."



F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for PEX Piping: Join according to ASTM F 1807.

H. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

G. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:



1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate testsource and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.



7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppmof chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppmof chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazedjoints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.



F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and

solder joints.2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-

sealed joints.3. PEX tube, fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsDOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.2. Backflow preventers.3. Strainers.4. Hose bibbs.5. Wall hydrants.6. Drain valves.7. Trap-seal primer valves.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.




A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1001.2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.3. Body: Bronze.4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.5. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:


a. Armstrong International, Inc.b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. Honeywell International Inc.e. Legend Valve.f. Leonard Valve Company.g. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Symmons Industries, Inc.i. TACO Incorporated.j. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.k. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.8. Tempered-Water Setting: 110 deg F.9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.10. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.














6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.6 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.2. Body Material: Bronze.3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection

vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

2.7 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.3. Operation: Loose key.4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.11. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.3. Size: NPS 3/4.4. Body: Copper alloy.5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.



8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.9 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device :


a. MIFAB, Inc.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1018.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.4. Body: Bronze.5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome

finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.









B. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves where required by code with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

C. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsSANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING


SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.


A. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.



2.2 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall or Cellular Core ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.

B. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping.



I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

L. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."



3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

B. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor as required by code.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

D. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.



C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.



2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. See schedule on drawings.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS


SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Residential, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.2. Thermostat-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters.3. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.






A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Residential, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.2) Controls and Other Components: Two years.

b. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: One year(s).c. Compression Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESIDENTIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Residential, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. Bradford White Corporation.b. Lochinvar Corporation.c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.e. State Industries.

2. Standard: UL 174.3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings,

including extending lining material into tappings.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.








c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.2.e. Jacket: Steel, cylindrical, with enameled finish.f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet.g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for

nonsimultaneous operation unless otherwise indicated. Limited to 12 kW total.h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure

relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

B. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Reference drawings for requirements.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:


a. AMTROL Inc.b. Flexcon Industries.c. Honeywell International Inc.d. Pentair Pump Group (The); Myers.e. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.f. State Industries.g. Taco, Inc.

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 100 psig.b. Capacity Acceptable: 2 gal. minimum.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.










D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig- maximum outlet pressure unless otherwise indicated.

F. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

G. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating.

H. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

I. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

J. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.

K. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Residential, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install residential, electric, domestic-water heaters on water-heater stand on floor.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters at least 18 inches above floor on wall bracket.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.



3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

C. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping,"

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

H. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

I. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform tests and inspections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.



201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsRESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES


SECTION 224100 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bathtubs.2. Faucets.3. Lavatories.4. Showers.5. Kitchen sinks.6. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.7. Disposers.8. Water closets.9. Toilet seats.10. Supply fittings.11. Waste fittings.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing fixtures.


A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BATHTUBS

A. Bathtubs: Fiberglass or FRP, modular or one-piece with shower.

1. Fiberglass or FRP Bathtubs:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Clarion Bathware.2) Florestone Products Co., Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7406&mf=04&mf=95&src=pdf&mf=&src=pdf





3) Praxis Industries, LLC.4) Sterling.5) Swan Corporation (The).6) FiberFab7) Aquatic

2. Fixture:a. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2 for FRP bathtubs.b. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.c. Size: see schedule.d. Color: White.e. Drain: NPS 1-1/2; chrome-plated-brass, pop-up waste and overflow.

3. Faucet: See plans.4. Supply Fittings: Included in faucet.5. Tub Filler: Chrome-plated-brass diverter spout.6. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B45.125.2.b. Drain: Stainless steel or chrome-plated brass, removable strainer.c. Overflow: Chrome-plated-brass escutcheon with toggle drain-plug device.d. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 ABS or PVC, NPS 1-1/2 P-trap and waste.

2.2 BATHTUB FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Bathtub Faucets: Single handle, pressure balance.

1. Pressure-Balance Faucets:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) American Standard America.2) Kohler Co.3) Leonard Valve Company.4) Moen Incorporated.5) Speakman Company.6) Sterling.7) Symmons Industries, Inc.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.3. Faucet:

a. Body Material: Solid brass.b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.0 gpm unless otherwise indicated.d. Operation: Single handle, push-pull or twist or rotate control, with hot- and cold-

water indicators.e. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.f. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and cold-

water supply connections.g. Diverter: In-tub filler spout.














h. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2.

4. Shower Head:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.b. Type: Ball joint with arm and flange.c. Shower Head Material: Metal with chrome-plated finish.d. Spray Pattern: Fixed.e. Temperature Indicator: Integral with faucet.

5. Bathtub Filler Spout: Chrome-plated brass.

2.3 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories: Oval, vitreous china, counter mounted.

1. Vitreous-China Lavatories:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) American Standard America.2) Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.3) Kohler Co.4) Sterling.

2. Fixture:a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china lavatories.b. Type: Self-rimming.c. Oval Nominal Size: 20 by 17 inches.d. Color: White.

3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.

2.4 LAVATORY FAUCETS


B. Lavatory Faucets: Two-handle mixing valve.

1. General-Duty, Copper- or Brass-Underbody Faucets:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) American Standard America.2) Delta Faucet Company.3) Moen Incorporated.4) Kohler.5) Sterling.6) Peerless7) Cleveland8) Proflo














2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and

fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.4. Body Material: General-duty, copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.5. Finish: Polished chrome plate.6. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm.7. Centers: 4 inches.8. Mounting: Deck, exposed.9. Valve Handle(s): Lever.10. Spout: Rigid.11. Spout Outlet: Spray, 0.5 gpm.12. Drain: Pop up.

2.5 SHOWERS

A. Showers: Standard fiberglass or FRP modular or one-piece with base and faucet.

1. FRP Showers:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) Aqua Glass Corporation.2) Sterling.3) Swan Corporation (The).

2. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2.3. Nominal Size: 48 by 36 inches.4. Surround: One piece or sealed, multiple piece.5. Surround: One piece.6. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.7. Color: White.

2.6 SHOWER FAUCETS


B. Shower Faucets: Single handle, pressure-balance, mixing valve.

1. Single-Handle, Pressure-Balance Faucets:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) American Standard America.2) Kohler Co.3) Leonard Valve Company.4) Moen Incorporated.5) Speakman Company.6) Sterling.7) Symmons Industries, Inc.8) Peerless9) Cleveland10) Proflo















2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; check stops; and fixed shower

head, arm, and flange. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies.c. Body Material: Solid brass.d. Finish: Polished chrome plate.e. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated.f. Mounting: Concealed.g. Operation: Compression, manual.h. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.i. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and cold-

water supply connections.

3. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2.4. Shower Head:

a. Type: Ball joint and head integral with mounting flange.b. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.c. Spray Pattern: Fixed.

2.7 KITCHEN SINKS

A. Kitchen Sinks: One bowl, counter mounted, stainless steel.

1. Stainless-Steel Kitchen Sinks:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) Elkay Manufacturing Co.2) Kohler Co.3) Sterling.4) Cascadia5) Proflo6) Dayton

2. Fixture:a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen sinks.b. Metal Thickness: 0.038 inch.c. Bowl:

1) Dimensions: 29x15x9.2) Drain: 3-1/2-inch outlet for disposer.

a) Location: Centered in bowl.3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article, except include

continuous waste for multibowl sinks.

a. Disposer: Yes.b. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: Comply with requirements in "Dishwasher Air-Gap

Fittings" Article.







2.8 SINK FAUCETS


B. Sink Faucets: , kitchen sink.

1. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets:a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide


1) American Standard America.2) Chicago Faucets.3) Delta Faucet Company.4) Kohler Co.5) Moen Incorporated.6) Peerless7) Cleveland8) Proflo

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and

fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.4. Kitchen Sink Option: Separate hand spray complying with ASSE 1025.5. Finish: Polished chrome plate.6. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated.7. Mixing Valve: Single control.8. Centers: 8 inches.9. Mounting: Deck.10. Handle(s): Lever.11. Spout Type: Swing, shaped tube.12. Spout Outlet: Aerator.13. Drain: Lift and turn.

2.9 DISPOSERS

A. Disposers: Continuous-feed household, food waste.1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Standard America.b. InSinkErator.c. KitchenAid.d. Maytag.

2. Standards: ASSE 1008 and UL 430, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. General: Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper.

4. Motor: 115 V ac, 1725 rpm, 1/2 hp with overload protection.














2.10 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china.1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. American Standard America.b. Kohler Co.c. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.d. TOTO USA, INC.e. Vortonsf. Proflog. Gerber

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and ASSE 1037.b. Bowl Type : Siphon jet.c. Height: Standard.d. Rim Contour: Elongated.e. Water Consumption: Water saving.f. Color: White.

3. Toilet Seat: White.4. Supply Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching

water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with

inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Wheel handle.

d. Riser:

1) Size: NPS 3/8.2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible

hose riser.

2.11 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. American Standard America.b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.c. Church Seats.d. Kohler Co.e. Olsonite Seat Co.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.3. Material: Plastic.














4. Type: Residential.5. Shape: Elongated rim (Closed front).6. Configuration: Closed front with cover.7. Size: Elongated.8. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.9. Seat Cover: Required.10. Color: White.

2.12 SUPPLY FITTINGS


B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Lavatory and Kitchen Sink Supply Fittings:

1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.

2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.

a. Operation: Wheel handle <Insert type>.

3. Risers:

a. Size: NPS 3/8 for lavatories.b. Size: NPS 1/2 for kitchen sinks.c. Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose

riser.

2.13 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 straight tailpiece as part of faucet for standard lavatories.

C. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset tailpiece for accessible kitchen sinks.

D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 straight tailpiece for standard kitchen sinks.

E. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4 for lavatories.2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 for kitchen sinks.3. Material: ASTM F 409 ABS or PVC two-piece trap and waste to wall and wall flange.

2.14 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.

C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install toilet seats on water closets.

F. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

G. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

H. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

J. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink deck.Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.

K. Set bathtubs and shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.

L. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

M. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."



N. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsCOMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.



2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase.3. Capacitor start, inductor run.4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsHANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.5. Equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.2. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.






A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Per code, clevis hangers or equal.

C. Pex Pipe Hangers

1. Description: Pex hangers.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig orASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psigminimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.



2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black andgalvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use



operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

K. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.



6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.




3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: ABS vertical piping does not require vertical floor clamps. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.



K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsIDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Main duct and equipment identification only:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.


B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.3. Background Color: White.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsIDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels Main duct and equipment identification only.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsTESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB

as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:



1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.2. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.3. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.4. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.5. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.



L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Owner for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.



3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.



3.9 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:1. Manufacturers' test data.2. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.3. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Water and steam flow rates.3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.



4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.5. Terminal units.6. Balancing stations.7. Position of balancing devices.

3.10 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsDUCT INSULATION


SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."2. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.





2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket.Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.





C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4251&mf=04&mf=95&src=pdf&mf=04&src=pdf



















2.3 MASTICS


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.






C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.






2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.

























c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.


2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.



B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

2.7 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION













A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.



M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.3 PENETRATIONS






B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.


and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, installinsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.



C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.


E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."



3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 incho.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-footintervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.


A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:



1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end

joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.5. Flexible connectors.6. Vibration-control devices.7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.7 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.8 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsHVAC PIPING INSULATION


SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:1. Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."





2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
















a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75.d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.





D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.





2.4 MASTICS


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.






C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

































2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



Company; 30-45.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.5. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:






C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




























2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: White.



B. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.5. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.c. Tee covers.d. Flange and union covers.e. End caps.f. Beveled collars.g. Valve covers.h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.7 TAPES

A. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.c. Compac Corporation; 120.d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches.3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 5 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.



L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches] [4 inches] o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS



and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, installinsulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.



B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.



C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.





D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.


F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.



3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.





2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.



3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1.5 inch thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1.5 inch thick.

3.11 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be one of the following:1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE




1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsFACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING


SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.2. Piping specialties.3. Piping and tubing joining materials.4. Valves.5. Pressure regulators.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.









A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends.4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,

adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.8. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.2. Nitrile seals.3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.4. For indoor or outdoor applications.5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.



C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. Lee Brass Company.b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.3. Plug: Bronze.4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.






5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.3. Elevation compensator.4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


a. Actaris.b. American Meter Company.c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.e. Invensys.f. Maxitrol Company.g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port.6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.c. Harper Wyman Co.d. Maxitrol Company.e. SCP, Inc.















2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. Jomar International Ltd.e. Matco-Norca, Inc.f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inchesdeep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.












C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.



P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified.5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.



3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping.

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.




A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:1. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.11 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following:1. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:1. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:1. Bronze plug valve.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsREFRIGERANT PIPING

1/11/2013 Construction Documents 23 23 00 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include

pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:1. Thermostatic expansion valves.2. Solenoid valves.3. Hot-gas bypass valves.4. Filter dryers.5. Strainers.6. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design

actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Brazing certificates.B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in

maintenance manuals.1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior

and exterior are clean when installed.



1.9 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These

items are specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories."PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long

assembly.4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING ACCESSORIESA. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.4. Seat: Nylon.5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

B. Packed-Angle Valves:1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.3. Operator: Rising stem.4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

C. Check Valves:1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

D. Service Valves:



1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.4. End Connections: Copper spring.5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.4. End Connections: Threaded.5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.4. End Connections: Threaded.5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.6. Superheat: Adjustable.7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.

H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.6. Equalizer: Internal.7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.8. End Connections: Socket.9. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

I. Straight-Type Strainers:1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.3. End Connections: Socket or flare.4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.



J. Angle-Type Strainers:1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.4. End Connections: Socket or flare.5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:1. Body: Forged brass.2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.5. End Connections: Socket or flare.6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets.2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).5. End Connections: Socket.6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).5. End Connections: Socket.6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

2.3 REFRIGERANTSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.








PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type L, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. At contractors option pre-insulated PDM Frigocopper may be used.

B. Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 3-1/2 for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONSA. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.B. Provide isolation valves for each indoor fan coil unit for future maintenance.C. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.D. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.E. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.F. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.G. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.H. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.I. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe

safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.J. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.K. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for device being protected:1. Solenoid valves.2. Thermostatic expansion valves.3. Hot-gas bypass valves.4. Compressor.

L. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.M. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.N. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONA. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.



B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.G. Install piping free of sags and bends.H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Section 08 31 13 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

M. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

N. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

O. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures:1. Shot blast the interior of piping.2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing

by means of a wire or electrician's tape.3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.

Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the

tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be

open to allow unrestricted flow.P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."



S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 23 05 18 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTIONA. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to

prevent scale formation.D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal

threading is specified.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.



D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:1. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.2. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

E. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.2. Continuous pressure test. Set air pressure in piping at 100psi with gauge and monitor

daily during construction.3. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.

4. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design

temperature.D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.

END OF SECTION 23 23 00

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsMETAL DUCTS


SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Round ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Sealants and gaskets.5. Hangers and supports.6. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.



4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic

restraints, and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports and seismic

restraints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.




a. Lindab Inc.b. McGill AirFlow LLC.c. SEMCO Incorporated.d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.









2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.



G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.3. Hilti Corp.4. Kinetics Noise Control.5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division.6. Mason Industries.7. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.8. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.












Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B.6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:

Seal Class A.7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.



9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximumof 80 feet o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.



E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.

C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.



b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.



3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees."Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsAIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Manual volume dampers.2. Control dampers.3. Fire dampers.4. Smoke dampers.5. Flange connectors.6. Turning vanes.7. Duct-mounted access doors.8. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and

smoke detectors.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.b. Manual volume damper installations.c. Control-damper installations.d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted

access doors.e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."



B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.d. McGill AirFlow LLC.e. Nailor Industries Inc.f. Pottorff.g. Ruskin Company.h. Trox USA Inc.i. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel.b. Mitered and welded corners.c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.7. Bearings:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456823341&mf=04&&mf=04&src=pdf











a. Oil-impregnated bronze.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.4. Nailor Industries Inc.5. Pottorff.6. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded or mechanically attached corners and mounting flange.

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable device and switch package, factory installed, rated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.063-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel.

H. Leakage: Class I.

I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

J. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.039-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.









K. Damper Motors: two-position action.

L. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.

4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.

6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

M. Accessories:1. Test and reset switches, damper mounted.

2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. Elgen Manufacturing.4. METALAIRE, Inc.5. SEMCO Incorporated.











6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single wall.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.4. Elgen Manufacturing.5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.7. McGill AirFlow LLC.8. Nailor Industries Inc.9. Pottorff.10. Ventfabrics, Inc.11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.c. Vision panel.d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches.e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks.c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.















2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. Elgen Manufacturing.4. Ventfabrics, Inc.5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inchthick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.








C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.2. Upstream from duct filters.3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.4. At drain pans and seals.5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.8. Upstream from turning vanes.9. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

K. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.




A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper

heat-response device is installed.4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsPACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS


SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories:

1. Direct-expansion cooling.2. Gas furnace.3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.4. Integral, space temperature controls.5. Roof curbs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

D. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply-air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

E. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.


A. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.



A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.



B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control test reports.

B. Warranty.




A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigerant system safety.2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. AAON, Inc.





2. Carrier Corporation.3. McQuay International.4. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc.5. YORK International Corporation.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.

C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:

1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick.

D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.2. Thickness: 1 inch.3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-

resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inchesdeep.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound.

F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.3 FANS

A. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.

B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

C. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when fan-mounted frame and RTU-mounted frame are anchored to building structure.







D. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.4 COILS

A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2. Coil Split: Interlaced.3. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating formed with

pitch and drain connections.

B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief.

B. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R-410A.2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.6. Minimum off-time relay.7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 7.

2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas.2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.



C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

E. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating.2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing

pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.

2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control-voltage transformer.2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat-cool-off switch.b. Fan on-auto switch.c. Fan-speed switch.d. Automatic changeover.e. Adjustable deadband.f. Concealed set point.g. Concealed indication.h. Degree F indication.i. Unoccupied-period-override push button.j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and

unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.

B. Electronic Controller:

1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.2. Safety Control Operation:

a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected.Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.



b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg Fenters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.

c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 283112 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."

3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of two programmable periods per day.

4. Unoccupied Period:

a. Heating Setback: 10 deg F.b. Cooling Setback: System off.c. Override Operation: Two hours.

5. Supply Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously.b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.

6. Refrigerant Circuit Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain room temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Compressors off.

7. Gas Furnace Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Modulate burner to maintain room temperature.b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.

8. Fixed Minimum Outdoor-Air Damper Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Open to 100 percent.b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor-air damper.

2.11 ROOF CURBS

A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.b. Thickness: 2 inches.

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner



when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

B. Curb Height: 24 inches.

C. Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site.

2.12 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.

C. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

D. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb.3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.Report results in writing.



B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsPACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS


SECTION 238113 - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged terminal air conditioners and their accessories and controls, in the following configurations:

1. Through-the-wall air conditioners.2. Heat-pump units.



B. Shop Drawings: For packaged terminal air conditioners. Include plans, elevations, sections, details for wall penetrations, seismic bracing, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver, and for each color and texture specified.







B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged terminal air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion, including components and labor.

2. Warranty Period for Nonsealed System Parts: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion, including only components and excluding labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company.2. ClimateMaster, Inc.3. Friedrich Air Conditioning Co.4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Appliances.5. McQuay International.6. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.7. Amana8. Fujitsu

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, self-contained, packaged terminal air conditioner with room cabinet, electric refrigeration system, heating, and temperature controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil; with cord-connected chassis.

2.3 CHASSIS

A. Cabinet: 0.052-inchthick steel with removable front panel with concealed latches.

1. Mounting: Wall with wall sleeve.2. Discharge Grille: Punched-louver discharge grille allowing four-way discharge-air

pattern.3. Finish: Epoxy coating.4. Access Door: Hinged door in top of cabinet for access to controls.5. Cabinet Extension: Matching cabinet in construction and finish, allowing diversion of

airflow to adjoining room; with grille.6. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.7. Wall Sleeves: Galvanized steel with polyester finish.










B. Refrigeration System: Direct-expansion indoor coil with capillary restrictor; and hermetically sealed scroll compressor with vibration isolation and overload protection.

1. Indoor and Outdoor Coils: Seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins with capillary tube distributor on indoor coil.

2. Accumulator.3. Constant-pressure expansion valve.4. Reversing valve.5. Charge: R-410A.

C. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal; with motor and positive-pressure ventilation damper with concealed manual operator.

D. Filters: Washable polyurethane in molded plastic frame.

E. Condensate Drain: Drain pan to direct condensate to outdoor coil for re-evaporation.

1. Comply with ASHRAE 62.1 for drain pan construction and connections.

F. Outdoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal type with separate motor.

1. Indoor and Outdoor Fan Motors: Two speed; comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Fan Motors: Permanently lubricated split capacitor.b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.c. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium-wire, electric-resistance heating elements with contactor and high-temperature-limit switch.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Control Module: Unit-mounted digital panel with touchpad temperature control and with touchpad for heating, cooling, and fan operation. Include the following features:

1. Low Ambient Lockout Control: Prevents cooling-cycle operation below 40 deg F outdoor air temperature.

2. Heat-Pump Ambient Control: Field-adjustable switch changes to heat-pump heating operation above 40 deg F and to supplemental heating below plus 25 deg F.

3. Temperature-Limit Control: Prevents occupant from exceeding preset setback or setup temperature.

4. Reverse-Cycle Defrost: Solid-state sensor monitors frost buildup on outdoor coil and reverses unit to melt frost.

B. Remote Control: Standard unit-mounted controls with remote-mounted, low-voltage adjustable thermostat with heat anticipator, heat-off-cool-auto switch, and on-auto fan switch. Provide with a minimum of a 5 degree F deadband.

C. Outdoor Air: Motorized intake damper. Open intake when unit indoor air fan runs.



D. Outdoor Air: Manual intake damper.

2.5 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See plans


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 300, "Sound Rating and Sound Transmission Loss of Packaged Terminal Equipment."

B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380/CSA C744, "Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and tolerances.

B. Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

C. Install and anchor wall sleeves to withstand, without damage to equipment and structure, seismic forces required by building code.



1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.2. After installing packaged terminal air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Packaged terminal air conditioners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsVARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS


SECTION 238127 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes variable refrigerant volume and heat-pump units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Field quality-control reports.B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. ASHRAE Compliance:1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for

Refrigeration Systems."2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor

Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.8 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor/dealer. The bidders shall be

required to submit training certification proof with bid documents. The mechanical contractor’s installation price shall be based on the systems installation requirements. The mechanical contractor bids with complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements.



1.9 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Six year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The HVAC equipment basis of design is Daikin AC. All bidders shall furnish the minimum system standards as defined by the base bid model numbers, model families or as otherwise specified herein. In any event the contractor shall be responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation:1. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division.2. Daikin AC.

2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)A. FXAQ – Wall Mount Units

1. General: Daikin indoor unit model FXAQ shall be wall mounted fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto wall. It shall be available in capacities from 7,000 Btu/h to 24,000 Btu/h. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while limiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1E7. The indoor units sound pressure level shall range from 29 dB(A) to 32 dB(A) at low speed and 33 dB(A) to 36 dB(A) at high speed 5 feet below the suction grille.

B. Indoor Unit:1. The Daikin indoor unit FXDQ shall be completely factory assembled and tested. Included

in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have adjustable external static pressure capabilities.

2. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory.

3. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.4. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump (when

required). The condensate pump provides up to 23-5/8” of lift from the center of the drain outlet.

5. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.6. The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.7. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and

maintenance.C. Unit Cabinet.

1. The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and return openings.

2. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

D. Fan:





1. The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.

2. The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 62W to 130W.

3. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.4. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.5. The fan motor shall be equipped as standard with adjustable external static pressure

(ESP) settings.E. Filter:

1. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

F. Coil:1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into

aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.2. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to

ensure highly efficient performance.3. The coil shall be a 2 or 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI design

completely factory tested.4. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1-1/32”

outside diameter PVC.5. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.6. A condensate pump with a 23-5/8” lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate

pan with a built in safety alarm.7. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

G. Electrical1. A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The

acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of

3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).3. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a

maximum distance of 1,640 feet.H. Control:

1. The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform input functions necessary to operate the system.

2. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to BACnet networks or interfacing with connection to BMS system.

3. Remote “in-room” sensor kit BRC1E71. The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recommended for ceiling-embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit).

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITSA. The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a Daikin Variable Refrigerant

Volume Series (heat or cool model) split system as specified. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, REFNET™ joints and headers, a two-pipe refrigeration distribution system using PID control and Daikin VRV condenser unit. The condenser shall be a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat pump, multi-zone air-conditioning system with variable speed inverter driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. The condensing unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 130% of the condensing unit capacity without limiting fan coil EEV position or fan speed. All zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control.

B. Operation of the system shall permit either full cooling capacity or full heating heating of all ofthe indoor units. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set



temperature independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Controller or a BMS interface.

C. Refrigerant Piping1. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 620 equivalent

feet from the condensing unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of piping between the condensing and indoor units with 295 feet maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps. T style joints shall not be acceptable as this will negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and performance.

D. General: The condensing unit is designed specifically for use with VRVIII series components.1. The condensing unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary

electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator. Liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the condensing and indoor units.

2. Each condensing system shall be able to support the connection of up to 59 indoor units dependant on the model of the condensing unit.

3. The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced noise during night time.

4. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming.

5. The unit shall incorporate an auto-charging feature.6. The condensing unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side

installation with minimum spacing.7. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure

sensor and switch, low pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers.

8. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various indoor units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature..

9. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation. Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation and defrost cycle. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature.

10. The condensing unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat source.

11. The condensing unit shall have integral, on-board terminals to allow DDC to toggle between Heat and Cool mode of operation via hard-wire connection.

12. The condensing unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.

13. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive 350 or 750 W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter.

14. The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC (digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factoryset as standard at 0.12 in. WG with a field setting switch to a maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure.

15. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum range of 6,350 CFM to 24,690 CFM dependent on model specified.

16. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted.



17. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts.18. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically

limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature.19. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum

fins to form a mechanical bond.20. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to

ensure high efficiency performance.21. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless

copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design..

22. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type E1.

23. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.

24. The Daikin inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed (PVM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value.

25. The capacity control range shall be 4% to 100%.26. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.27. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety

switch, and internal thermal overload protector.28. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil

management system.29. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.30. 18-20 ton units shall contain a minimum of 4 compressors. 22-26 ton units shall contain

a minimum of 5 compressors. 28-30 ton units shall contain a minimum of 6 compressors. In the event of compressor failure the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condition.

31. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours.

E. Electrical:1. The power supply to the condensing unit shall be 208-230 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz +/-

10%.2. The control voltage between the indoor and condensing unit shall be 16VDC non-

shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable.3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible

to connect multiple indoor units to one condensing unit with one 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring installation.

2.4 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICSA. See Drawings

PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.



C. Install seismic restraints.D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal

Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICEA. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

END OF SECTION 23 81 26

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsLOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC and nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC orNonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."



3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsCONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES


SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. UTP cabling.2. RS-485 cabling.3. Low-voltage control cabling.4. Control-circuit conductors.5. Identification products.




A. Source quality-control reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.



2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.4 UTP CABLE


1. ADC.2. Alpha Wire Company; a division of Belden Inc.3. Belden Inc.4. CommScope, Inc.5. Draka Cableteq USA.6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc.8. Nexans; Berk-Tek Products.9. Siemon Company (The).10. Superior Essex Inc.11. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.12. 3M.13. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, 24-pair UTP, formed into four-pair binder groups with no overall jacket,.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties of Category 5e cables.2. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables.3. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications.4. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 5e.

2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC.2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.3. Belden Inc.4. Dynacom Inc.5. Hubbell Incorporated.6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.8. Panduit Corp.9. Siemon Company (The).10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.


























C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

G. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

H. Faceplates:

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical-fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

2.6 RS-485 CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Paired, one pair, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.3. Unshielded.4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.

2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.2. PVC insulation.3. Unshielded.4. PVC jacket.5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.



2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44.

D. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.


A. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2.

B. Factory test optical-fiber cables according to TIA-568-C.3.

C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inchesdeep.

2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the finished wall surface.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.



D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed aroundperimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.2. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated

elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and patch panels.3. Cables may not be spliced.4. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

9. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.10. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Optical-Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.2. Terminate cable on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:



1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and corrugated panels.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment.

3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969.





1. Visually inspect UTP and optical-fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsGROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.7. ILSCO.8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.













4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.



3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding

bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.



3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.




A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsHANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.


A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Atkore International.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.


















2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti, Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.







3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.



201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsRACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.



1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

C. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

D. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

E. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

F. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

G. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.



C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.

1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of polymer concrete.



1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Trash Rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.



E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal



bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

O. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

P. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.



T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

U. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

V. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inchesof finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.



3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsIDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Identification of power and control cables.2. Underground-line warning tape.3. Warning labels and signs.4. Instruction signs.5. Equipment identification labels.6. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.



D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.2 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electricalutility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,.3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,.

C. Tag: Type ID:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored,compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils.3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft..5. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.



3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trenchexceeds 16 inches overall.

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.



3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied.b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.



I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsLIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Indoor occupancy sensors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.






A. Operation and maintenance data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.2. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.4. Sensor Switch, Inc.5. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.








3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inchminimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

C. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

D. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

E. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsPANELBOARDS


SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.



B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


C. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.





B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.


2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Load centers in units shall be mounted per ADA.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.




1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsWIRING DEVICES


SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Weather-resistant receptacles.3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.4. Solid-state fan speed controls.5. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.6. Communications outlets.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).







4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type.2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; GFTR20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2095TR.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:













1) Single Pole:

2) Cooper; AH1221.3) Hubbell; HBL1221.4) Leviton; 1221-2.5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

6) Two Pole:


11) Three Way:


16) Four Way:


C. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221L.b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.6 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES

A. Residential-Grade, Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; TR270.b. Hubbell; RR155TR.c. Leviton; T5320.d. Pass & Seymour; TR62.



2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.

B. Telephone Outlet:


a. Cooper; 3560-6.b. Leviton; 40649.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

C. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:


a. Cooper; 3562.b. Leviton; 40159.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:



1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsFUSES


SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits andenclosed switches.







B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.






201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsFUSES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay.

B. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay.

C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

D. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Shunt trip switches.4. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.









PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.











C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.2. Oiltight ON pilot light.3. Isolated neutral lug.4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed.5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac coil voltage.7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsCENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


SECTION 263323.11 - CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interruptible (fast-transfer) central battery equipment rated 600 V and less for emergency lighting:

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. Interruptible: As used in the Section Text, an off-line, passive-standby or line-interactive, inverter-only unit, with an intentional interruption of power to the load until an internal transfer switch picks up and transfers the load to the unit's inverter and internal battery source on loss of the "normal" source, and then retransfers to the "normal" source when it is restored. Transfer time can be "slow" (up to approximately 1 second) or "fast" (2-4 ms or 40-50 ms, depending on manufacturer).

C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: For each type and rating of central battery equipment unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and rating of central battery equipment unit.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, ventilation requirements, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include system one-line diagram, internal and interconnecting wiring; and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Include elevation, details, and legends of control and indication displays.5. Include -circuit current (withstand) rating of unit.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around central battery equipment.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For central battery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.



E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace central battery equipment that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special warranty, applying to batteries only, applies to materials only, on a prorated basis, for period specified.

1. Warranty Period: Include the following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Central Battery Equipment (excluding Batteries): One year(s).b. Standard VRLA Batteries:

1) Full Warranty: One year(s).2) Pro Rata: Nine years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Central battery equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. The designated central battery equipment shall be tested and certified by an NRTL as meeting ICC-ES AC 156 test procedure requirements.


2.2 INTERRUPTIBLE (FAST-TRANSFER) CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Chloride Systems.2. Cooper Industries, Inc.3. Dual-Lite.

B. General Requirements for Interruptible (Fast-Transfer) Central Battery Equipment:







1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label central battery equipment to comply with UL 924 and UL 1778.

3. Comply with the IBC, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101.4. Comply with NEMA PE 1.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Fast-Transfer Central Battery Equipment: Passive standby (off-line) system.Automatically sense loss of normal ac supply and use a solid-state static switch to transfer load. Transfer in 2-4 ms or less from normal supply to battery-inverter supply.

2. Automatic Operation:

a. Normal Conditions: Supply the load with ac power flowing from normal ac power input terminals, bypassing inverter, with battery connected in parallel via rectifier/charger output.

b. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal ac supply deviates from specified voltage, transfer switch operates and battery supplies constant, regulated ac power through the inverter to the load, with a momentary loss of power to the load.

c. If normal power fails, transfer switch operates and battery supplies constant, regulated ac power through the inverter to the load, with a momentary loss of power to the load.

d. If a fault occurs in system when being supplied by inverter and current flows in excess of the overload rating of inverter, inverter automatically protects itself against damage from overloads and short circuits by shutting down.

e. When normal ac power is restored at input supply terminals of unit, controls automatically retransfer the load back to the normal ac supply, with a momentary loss of power to the load. Rectifier/charger then recharges battery.

f. If normal power failure is prolonged (more than 90 minutes), integral low-voltage battery protective circuit disconnects battery and prevents battery from damage due to deep discharge.

g. If battery becomes discharged, and when normal ac supply is again available, rectifier/charger recharges battery. When battery is fully charged, rectifier/charger automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

h. If battery is disconnected, and normal ac power is available, central battery equipment continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of output bus.

D. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of central battery equipment input voltage rating.

2. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of central battery equipment frequency rating.

3. Synchronizing Slew Rate: 1 Hz per second, maximum.4. Minimum Off-Line Efficiency: 95 percent at 60 Hz, full load.5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or

operating condition.6. Ambient Temperature Rating (Other Than Batteries): Not less than 68 deg F and not

exceeding 86 deg F.7. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Other Than Batteries): Not less than minus 4

deg F and not exceeding 158 deg F8. Ambient Temperature Rating (Batteries): Not less than 32 deg F and not exceeding 104

deg F.



9. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating (Batteries): Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F

10. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).11. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.12. Off-Line Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum

of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.

E. Inverter and Controls Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits; provides complete self-diagnostics, periodic automatic testing and reporting; with alarms.

F. Controls and Indication:

1. Status Indication: Door-mounted, labeled LED indicators or digital screen displaying the following conditions:

a. Normal power available.b. Status of system.c. Battery charging status.d. On battery power.e. System fault.f. External fault.

G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide protection against damage from supply voltage surges as defined in IEEE C62.45, Category B and C.

2. Integral, programmable, self-diagnostic and self-test circuitry; with alarms and logging.3. Battery deep-discharge and self-discharge protection; with alarms.4. Battery self-test circuitry; with alarms and logging.

H. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, complying with UL 489.

1. Integrated Equipment Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA.

I. Inverter:

1. Description: Solid-state, high-frequency, PWM type, with the following operational features:

a. Automatically regulate output voltage to within plus or minus 3 percent, for all load ranges and for maximum 25 percent step-load changes; regulation may increase to 8 percent for 100 percent step-load changes.

b. Automatically regulate output frequency to within plus or minus 1 Hz, from no load to full load, at unity power factor, over the operating range of battery voltage.

c. Output Voltage Waveform: Sine wave with maximum 3 percent TDD throughout battery operating-voltage range, for 100 percent linear load.

d. Inverter Overload Capability: 115 percent for 10 minutes; 150 percent surge for 10seconds.

e. Load Power Factor: 0.5 lead to 0.5 lag.

J. Rectifier/Battery Charger:

1. Description: Solid state, variable rate, temperature compensated; automatically maintains batteries in fully charged condition when normal power is available.



2. Maximum Battery Recharge Time from Fully Discharged State: 24 hours.3. Low-voltage disconnect circuit reduces battery discharge during extended power

outages, monitors battery voltage, and disconnects inverter when battery voltage drops to no less than 85.7 percent of nominal voltage.

K. Batteries:

1. Description: Standard VRLA batteries.

a. Capable of sustaining full-capacity output of inverter unit for minimum of 90 minutes.

2. Battery Disconnect and OCPD: Manufacturer's standard.

L. Integral Output Disconnecting Means and OCPD:1. Multiple-Output OCPDs: Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers, complying with UL 489;

voltage rating matching unit output voltage rating; 20 A, single pole.

a. Normally Closed: 2; with trip alarm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of central battery equipment with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Install central battery equipment on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For units not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Suspended-Mounted Central Battery Equipment: Suspend central battery equipment from structural ceiling components using hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of units to be supported. Provide support devices complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

D. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.2. Comply with requirements for cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for

Electrical Systems."



3. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

H. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

I. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes and bonding connections to metallic piping systems as indicated; comply with NFPA 70.

K. Install control wiring between central battery equipment and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

L. Identify central battery equipment, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Inspect central battery equipment, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.

2. Test insulation resistance for all external branch circuit, feeder, control, and alarm wiring connected to central battery equipment element and component.

3. Test continuity of each circuit.4. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

manufacturer's written instructions and in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification, including specifically those for batteries, battery chargers, and UPS, regardless of the type of central battery equipment provided. Certify compliance with test parameters.

5. Perform a load-duration test at rated voltage and rated output current to verify the correct functional operation of the unit under full-load stable operating conditions for the minimum time limits required by UL 924. Monitor and record ambient temperature and temperatures within the unit.


7. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Central battery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies central battery equipment and describes all test results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.



3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central battery equipment, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based control, monitoring, and display functions.

END OF SECTION 263323.11

201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsINTERIOR LIGHTING


SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products with aesthetics similar to fixtures indicated on Drawings, as approved by Architect.



2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated.4. Sound Rating: Class A.5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.9. BF: 0.88 or higher.10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.



D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

E. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

F. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent.

G. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and

lamp type indicated.4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

H. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and

lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: Class A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-

power-factor electronic ballasts.10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.



2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required

test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.



3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.


201207 / Moreland Station ApartmentsDIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM


SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Nonsystem smoke detectors.5. Heat detectors.6. Notification appliances.7. Remote annunciator.8. Addressable interface device.9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.6. Include battery-size calculations.7. Include input/output matrix.8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been

tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and

humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.



C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment.

d. Riser diagram.e. Record copy of site-specific software.f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:



1) Equipment tested.2) Frequency of testing of installed components.3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Smoke detectors.4. Duct smoke detectors.5. Carbon monoxide detectors.6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.7. Fire standpipe system.



B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote

annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.8. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.9. Activate elevator power shunt trip.10. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module,

or remote annunciator.4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.7. Break in standby battery circuitry.8. Failure of battery charging.9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote

annunciators.3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Notifier.2. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.3. Silent Knight.4. SimplexGrinnell LP.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.

E. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

F. Elevator Recall:

1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices:

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.







a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.

I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES


B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.

1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS


B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.











2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.a. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.b. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Ionization Smoke Detector:




E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.






3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or

internal faults.5. Comply with UL 2075.6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system.8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.

2.8 NONSYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Nonsystem Smoke Detectors:

1. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall be listed as compatible with the fire-alarm equipment installed or shall have a contact closure interface listed for the connected load.

2. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall meet the monitoring for integrity requirements in NFPA 72.

B. Single-Station Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 217; suitable for NFPA 101, residential occupancies; operating at 120-V ac with 9-V dc battery as the secondary power source. Provide with "low" or "missing" battery chirping-sound device.

2. Auxiliary Relays: One Form A and one Form C, both rated at 0.5 A.3. Audible Notification Appliance: Piezoelectric sounder rated at 90 dBA at 10 feet

according to UL 464.4. Visible Notification Appliance: 177-cd strobe.5. Test Switch: Push to test; simulates smoke at rated obscuration.6. Tandem Connection: Allow tandem connection of number of indicated detectors; alarm

on one detector shall actuate notification on all connected detectors.7. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted

in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

8. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

9. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.



2.9 HEAT DETECTORS


B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES


1. Cooper Wheelock.2. Gentex Corporation.3. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.4. SimplexGrinnell LP.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464.

D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.











2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recalland to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.



2. Programming device.3. LED display.4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.2. Address of the supervisory signal.3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.4. Loss of ac supply.5. Loss of power.6. Low battery.7. Abnormal test signal.8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.



G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts.

I. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

J. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

K. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

L. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.2. Magnetically held-open doors.3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.10. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.



G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


201027 / Moreland Station Apartments 01/15/13 Construction Documents

Site Clearing311000-1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities or abandoning site utilities

in place. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.


1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for field engineering and surveying. 3. Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal 4. Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site

improvements. 5. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably



free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

E. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.

G. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify Call Before You Dig for area where Project is located before site clearing.



C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

G. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.



3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.



F. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective Demolition."

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches

(450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches (150 mm) in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.



1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



Earth Moving312000-1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks. 5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earth moving progress.

2. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

3. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

5. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction.

6. Section 315000 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations.

7. Section 316329 "Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts" for excavation of shafts and disposal of surplus excavated material.

8. Section 329300 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting.

9. Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for drainage of walls.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices for earth moving specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

B. Quantity allowances for earth moving are included in Section 012100 "Allowances."



C. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.

1. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 2. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. 3. 6 inches (150 mm)outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against

grade. 4. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm) wider

than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:



1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82 kN) with extra-long reach boom; measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp (172-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm) when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 3. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 2. Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.



C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify "Call Before You Dig" for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

C. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing," are in place.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

G. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 1" inch (25 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.



2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf (700 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf (630 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 (0.212-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.



f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:



1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

E. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."



3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes) to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork.



5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.



1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.



3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 334600 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades. 4. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness

in a single layer. 5. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted

thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

6. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.20 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



Storm Utility Drainage Pipe334100-1

SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure transition couplings. 3. Backwater valves. 4. Cleanouts. 5. Pipe outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.



B. Shop Drawings: 1. Stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, covers, and grates.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.



C. Handle stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

2.2 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. c. Logan Clay Pipe. d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.



3. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings:



a. Fernco Inc. b. Logan Clay Pipe. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

3. Description: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.3 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Plastic Backwater Valves:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Clean Check.

3. Description: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check valve.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:



a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.



3. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

4. Top-Loading Classification(s): Extra-Heavy Duty. 5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

B. Plastic Cleanouts:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, comparable product by one of the following:

a. Canplas LLC. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS Inc. d. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Zurn Light Commercial Products Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

3. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.5 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control." 1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, screen opening 5 inches (127 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,



and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install piping with 24-inch (610-mm) minimum cover. 3. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-

seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal-type backwater valves in piping where indicated.

3.5 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.

2. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.6 STORMWATER OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.



3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Unshielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different

OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.



1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).

C. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.



Subdrainage334600-1

SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Geotextile filter fabrics.


A. Product Data:

1. Geotextile filter fabrics.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Soil materials are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

2.3 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491.

B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.

1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2. 2. Styles: Flat and sock.


Subdrainage334600-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.

B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services.

C. Verify that drainage panels installed as part of foundation wall waterproofing is properly positioned to drain into subdrainage system.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 2. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing

upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose bell-and-spigot, push-on joints.

B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.

3.5 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 334100 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping."


Subdrainage334600-3

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 334100 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping."

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 334100 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. Comply with requirements for underground warning tapes specified in specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.



1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling.

2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.

B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.


PROJECT MANUAL MORELAND STATION APARTMENT …...AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL MORELAND STATION APARTMENT …...AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."...